daily update
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
4b95cf5c 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
1db37fe6 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
1db37fe6 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
1091Disables production of copy relocs.
1092
1093@item nodefaultlib
1094Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1095ignore any default library search paths.
1096
1097@item nodelete
1098Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1099
1100@item nodlopen
1101Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1102
1103@item nodump
1104Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1105
6aa29e7b
JJ
1106@item noexecstack
1107Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1108
1109@item norelro
1110Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1111
cd6d6c15
NC
1112@item now
1113When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1114dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1115when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1116deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1117first called.
1118
1119@item origin
1120Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1121
6aa29e7b
JJ
1122@item relro
1123Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1124
24718e3b
L
1125@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1126Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1127
1128@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1129Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1130
04c3a755
NS
1131@item stack-size=@var{value}
1132Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1133Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1134@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1135
cd6d6c15
NC
1136@end table
1137
ece2d90e 1138Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1139
1140@kindex -(
1141@cindex groups of archives
1142@item -( @var{archives} -)
1143@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1144The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1145either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1146
1147The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1148references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1149the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1150archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1151object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1152would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1153they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1154resolved.
1155
1156Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1157it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1158more archives.
1159
69da35b5
NC
1160@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1161@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1162@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1163@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1164Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1165recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1166and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1167the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1168behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1169so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1170restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1171
4a43e768
AM
1172@kindex --as-needed
1173@kindex --no-as-needed
1174@item --as-needed
1175@itemx --no-as-needed
1176This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1177on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1178the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1179on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1180needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1181emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1182non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1183the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1184non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1185Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1186the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1187needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1188from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1189
e56f61be
L
1190@kindex --add-needed
1191@kindex --no-add-needed
1192@item --add-needed
1193@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1194These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1195their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1196options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1197and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1198
252b5132
RH
1199@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1200@item -assert @var{keyword}
1201This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1202
1203@kindex -Bdynamic
1204@kindex -dy
1205@kindex -call_shared
1206@item -Bdynamic
1207@itemx -dy
1208@itemx -call_shared
1209Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1210for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1211default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1212for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1213multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1214@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1215
a1ab1d2a
UD
1216@kindex -Bgroup
1217@item -Bgroup
1218Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1219section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1220object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1221@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1222only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1223
252b5132
RH
1224@kindex -Bstatic
1225@kindex -dn
1226@kindex -non_shared
1227@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1228@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1229@itemx -dn
1230@itemx -non_shared
1231@itemx -static
1232Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1233platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1234variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1235may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1236library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1237option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1238option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1239shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1240references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1241libraries.
252b5132
RH
1242
1243@kindex -Bsymbolic
1244@item -Bsymbolic
1245When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1246definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1247for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1248within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1249platforms which support shared libraries.
1250
40b36307
L
1251@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1252@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1253When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1254symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1255This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1256libraries.
1257
55255dae
L
1258@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1259@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1260Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1261typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1262global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1263within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1264to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1265in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1266which support shared libraries.
1267
1268The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1269scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1270
40b36307
L
1271@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1272@item --dynamic-list-data
1273Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1274
1275@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1276@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1277Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1278is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1279
0b8a70d9
L
1280@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1281@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1282Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1283
252b5132
RH
1284@kindex --check-sections
1285@kindex --no-check-sections
1286@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1287@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1288Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1289been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1290perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1291suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1292allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1293restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1294Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1295force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1296option.
252b5132 1297
ddbb8a31
NC
1298@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1299@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1300@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1301@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1302This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1303by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1304command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1305output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1306input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1307specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1308follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1309behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1310
1311This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1312libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1313mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1314their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1315required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1316the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1317dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1318symbols.
1319
252b5132
RH
1320@cindex cross reference table
1321@kindex --cref
1322@item --cref
1323Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1324generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1325Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1326
1327The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1328easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1329sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1330symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1331definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1332where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1333symbol are listed.
252b5132 1334
4818e05f
AM
1335@cindex common allocation
1336@kindex --no-define-common
1337@item --no-define-common
1338This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1339The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1340@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1341
1342The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1343the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1344of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1345forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1346Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1347from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1348This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1349and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1350duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1351paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1352
252b5132 1353@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1354@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1355@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1356Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1357address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1358times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1359limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1360context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1361symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1362constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1363using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1364Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1365space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1366@var{expression}.
1367
1368@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1369@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1370@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1371@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1372@itemx --no-demangle
1373These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1374and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1375present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1376underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1377mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1378different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1379to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1380demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1381is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1382
1383@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1384@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1385@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1386@item -I@var{file}
1387@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1388Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1389generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1390linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1391doing.
1392
7ce691ae 1393@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1394@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1395@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1396@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1397Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1398with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1399
252b5132
RH
1400@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1401@item --force-exe-suffix
1402Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1403
1404If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1405@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1406the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1407option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1408Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1409it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1410
1411@kindex --gc-sections
1412@kindex --no-gc-sections
1413@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1414@item --gc-sections
1415@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1416Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1417targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1418performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1419@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1420
d5465ba2
AM
1421@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1422examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1423symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1424command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1425referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1426libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1427referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1428the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1429relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1430
ac69cbc6 1431This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1432@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1433specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1434a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1435
c17d87de
NC
1436@kindex --print-gc-sections
1437@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1438@cindex garbage collection
1439@item --print-gc-sections
1440@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1441List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1442printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1443collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1444default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1445be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1446line.
1447
30824704
RM
1448@kindex --print-output-format
1449@cindex output format
1450@item --print-output-format
1451Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1452other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1453in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1454
252b5132
RH
1455@cindex help
1456@cindex usage
1457@kindex --help
1458@item --help
1459Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1460
ea20a7da
CC
1461@kindex --target-help
1462@item --target-help
1463Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1464
2509a395
SL
1465@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1466@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1467Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1468@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1469
1470@cindex memory usage
1471@kindex --no-keep-memory
1472@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1473@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1474symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1475instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1476necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1477while linking a large executable.
1478
1479@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1480@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1481@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1482@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1483Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1484is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1485The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1486behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1487libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1488
aa713662
L
1489@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1490@kindex -z muldefs
1491@item --allow-multiple-definition
1492@itemx -z muldefs
1493Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1494report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1495first definition will be used.
1496
b79e8c78 1497@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1498@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1499@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1500@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1501Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1502This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1503determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1504shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1505how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1506
903249d7
NC
1507The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1508referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1509an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1510a shared library.
1511
1512The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1513libraries specified at link time are that:
1514
1515@itemize @bullet
1516@item
1517A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1518that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1519resolvable at load time.
1520@item
1521There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1522symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1523
1524The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1525select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1526architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1527appropriate memset function.
1528@end itemize
b79e8c78 1529
31941635
L
1530@kindex --no-undefined-version
1531@item --no-undefined-version
1532Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1533it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1534will be issued instead.
1535
3e3b46e5
PB
1536@kindex --default-symver
1537@item --default-symver
1538Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1539exported symbols.
1540
1541@kindex --default-imported-symver
1542@item --default-imported-symver
1543Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1544imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1545
252b5132
RH
1546@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1547@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1548Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1549files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1550been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1551This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1552errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1553have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1554inappropriate.
1555
fe7929ce
AM
1556@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1557@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1558Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1559library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1560
252b5132
RH
1561@kindex --no-whole-archive
1562@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1563Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1564archive files.
1565
1566@cindex output file after errors
1567@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1568@item --noinhibit-exec
1569Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1570Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1571errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1572when it issues any error whatsoever.
1573
0a9c1c8e
CD
1574@kindex -nostdlib
1575@item -nostdlib
1576Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1577command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1578(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1579
252b5132 1580@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1581@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1582@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1583@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1584file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1585@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1586object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1587object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1588should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1589usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1590name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1591list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1592command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1593this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1594@end ifclear
1595
36af4a4e
JJ
1596@kindex -pie
1597@kindex --pic-executable
1598@item -pie
1599@itemx --pic-executable
1600@cindex position independent executables
1601Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1602ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1603libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1604address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1605normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1606defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1607
252b5132
RH
1608@kindex -qmagic
1609@item -qmagic
1610This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1611
1612@kindex -Qy
1613@item -Qy
1614This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1615
1616@kindex --relax
1617@cindex synthesizing linker
1618@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1619@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1620@item --relax
28d5f677 1621@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1622An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1623@ifset GENERIC
1624This option is only supported on a few targets.
1625@end ifset
1626@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1627@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1628@end ifset
1629@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1630@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1631@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1632@ifset XTENSA
1633@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1634@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1635@ifset M68HC11
1636@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1637@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1638@ifset NIOSII
1639@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1640@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1641@ifset POWERPC
1642@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1643@end ifset
252b5132 1644
28d5f677
NC
1645On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1646global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1647addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1648synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1649instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1650
1651On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1652debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1653@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1654This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1655family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1660but ignored.
1661@end ifset
1662
28d5f677
NC
1663On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1664@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1665
252b5132
RH
1666@cindex retaining specified symbols
1667@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1668@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1669@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1670@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1671Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1672discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1673symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1674@ifset GENERIC
1675(such as VxWorks)
1676@end ifset
1677where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1678run-time memory.
1679
1680@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1681or symbols needed for relocations.
1682
1683You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1684line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1685
1686@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1687@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1688@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1689@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1690Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1691linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1692arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1693them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1694also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1695objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1696@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1697ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1698@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1699
ff5dcc92 1700The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1701SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1702@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1703runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1704options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1705gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1706file systems.
252b5132 1707
ff5dcc92 1708For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1709followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1710the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1711@end ifset
1712
1713@ifset GENERIC
1714@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1715@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1716@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1717When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1718happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1719of the input files.
1720
1721When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1722non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1723shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1724explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1725specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1726@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1727either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1728appearing multiple times.
1729
28c309a2
NC
1730This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1731that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1732is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1733runtime linker would do.
1734
252b5132 1735The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1736libraries:
252b5132
RH
1737@enumerate
1738@item
ff5dcc92 1739Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1740@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1741Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1742between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1743specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1744used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1745at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1746by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1747the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1748@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1749On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1750@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1751environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1752@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1753On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1754directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1755@item
a1b8d843 1756For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1757variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1758@item
ec4eb78a
L
1759For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1760@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1761libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1762@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1763@item
252b5132
RH
1764The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1765@item
1766For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1767exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1768@end enumerate
1769
1770If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1771warning and continue with the link.
1772@end ifset
1773
1774@kindex -shared
1775@kindex -Bshareable
1776@item -shared
1777@itemx -Bshareable
1778@cindex shared libraries
1779Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1780and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1781shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1782undefined symbols in the link.
1783
252b5132 1784@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1785@item --sort-common
1786@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1787@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1788This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1789ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1790sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1791eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1792between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1793specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --sort-section=name
1796@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1797This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1798patterns in the linker script.
1799
2509a395
SL
1800@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1801@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1802This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1803patterns in the linker script.
1804
252b5132 1805@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1806@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1807Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1808each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1809size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1810
1811@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1812@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1813Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1814output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1815This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1816certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1817cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1818that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1819support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1820input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1821more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1822many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1823
1824@kindex --stats
1825@item --stats
1826Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1827as execution time and memory usage.
1828
2509a395 1829@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1830@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1831Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1832configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1833that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1834
252b5132
RH
1835@kindex --traditional-format
1836@cindex traditional format
1837@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1838For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1839the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1840use the traditional format instead.
1841
1842@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1843For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1844symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1845full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1846@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1847trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1848combine duplicate entries.
1849
2509a395
SL
1850@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1851@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1852Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1853address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1854times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1855line.
1856@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1857for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1858@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1859should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1860sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1861
2509a395
SL
1862@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1863@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1864@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1865@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1866@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1867@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1868@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1869Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1870@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1871
2509a395
SL
1872@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1873@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1874@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1875When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1876byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1877
9d5777a3
RM
1878@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1879@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1880@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1881When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1882the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1883text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1884
0d705e9f
AM
1885@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1886@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1887@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1888When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1889model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1890
560e09e9
NC
1891@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1892@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1893Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1894values for @samp{method}:
1895
1896@table @samp
1897@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1898Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1899
1900@item report-all
da8bce14 1901Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1902
1903@item ignore-in-object-files
1904Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1905ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1906
1907@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1908Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1909ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1910when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1911libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1912command line.
1913@end table
1914
1915The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1916by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1917
1918Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1919unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1920can change this to a warning.
1921
1715a13c
L
1922@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1923@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1924@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1925@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1926Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1927supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1928the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1929argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1930
1931@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1932@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1933@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1934Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1935used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1936about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1937is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1938see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1939use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1940symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1941@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1942
7ce691ae 1943@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1944@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1945@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1946@item --warn-common
1947Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1948a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1949but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1950you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1951Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1952warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1953
1954There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1955
1956@table @samp
1957@item int i = 1;
1958A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1959file.
1960
1961@item extern int i;
1962An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1963There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1964variable somewhere.
1965
1966@item int i;
1967A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1968variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1969The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1970single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1971size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1972a definition of the same variable.
1973@end table
1974
1975The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1976Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1977just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1978encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1979a common symbol.
1980
1981@enumerate
1982@item
1983Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1984definition for the symbol.
1985@smallexample
1986@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1987 overridden by definition
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1989@end smallexample
1990
1991@item
1992Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1993the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1994except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1995@smallexample
1996@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1997 overriding common
1998@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1999@end smallexample
2000
2001@item
2002Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2003@smallexample
2004@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2005 of `@var{symbol}'
2006@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2007@end smallexample
2008
2009@item
2010Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2011@smallexample
2012@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2013 overridden by larger common
2014@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2015@end smallexample
2016
2017@item
2018Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2019the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2020encountered in a different order.
2021@smallexample
2022@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2023 overriding smaller common
2024@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2025@end smallexample
2026@end enumerate
2027
2028@kindex --warn-constructors
2029@item --warn-constructors
2030Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2031object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2032detect the use of global constructors.
2033
2034@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2035@item --warn-multiple-gp
2036Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2037This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2038Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2039section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2040of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2041base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2042base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2043bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2044large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2045values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2046option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2047
2048@kindex --warn-once
2049@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2050@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2051@item --warn-once
2052Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2053which refers to it.
2054
2055@kindex --warn-section-align
2056@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2057@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2058@item --warn-section-align
2059Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2060alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2061The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2062is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2063the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2064
8fdd7217
NC
2065@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2066@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2067Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2068
a0c402a5
L
2069@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2070@item --warn-alternate-em
2071Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2072
560e09e9
NC
2073@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2074@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2075If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2076@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2077This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2078
2079@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2080@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2081This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2082it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2083
252b5132
RH
2084@kindex --whole-archive
2085@cindex including an entire archive
2086@item --whole-archive
2087For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2088@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2089in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2090files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2091library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2092library. This option may be used more than once.
2093
7ec229ce 2094Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2095about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2096Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2097list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2098your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2099
2509a395
SL
2100@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2101@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2102Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2103@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2104undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2105@var{symbol}.
2106
2107This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2108wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2109wishes to call the system function, it should call
2110@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2111
2112Here is a trivial example:
2113
2114@smallexample
2115void *
cc2f008e 2116__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2117@{
cc2f008e 2118 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2119 return __real_malloc (c);
2120@}
2121@end smallexample
2122
ff5dcc92 2123If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2124all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2125instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2126call the real @code{malloc} function.
2127
2128You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2129links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2130you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2131file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2132call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2133
6aa29e7b
JJ
2134@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2135@item --eh-frame-hdr
2136Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2137@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2138
e41b3a13
JJ
2139@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2140@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2141Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2142generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2143if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2144
6c1439be
L
2145@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2146@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2147@item --enable-new-dtags
2148@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2149This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2150systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2151@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2152and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2153If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2154created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2155those options are only available for ELF systems.
2156
2d643429 2157@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2158@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2159Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2160close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2161time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2162increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2163value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2164
fdc90cb4
JJ
2165@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2166@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2167Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2168@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2169new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2170the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2171hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2172
35835446
JR
2173@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2174@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2175This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2176linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2177for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2178about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2179
4f9c04f7 2180Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21811021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2182run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2183has been used.
2184
2185The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2186enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2187
c0065db7
RM
2188@kindex --build-id
2189@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2190@item --build-id
2191@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2192Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2193or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2194unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2195@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2196@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2197@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2198the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2199string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2200@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2201is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2202
2203The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2204that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2205unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2206to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2207file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2208string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2209
2210Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2211@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2212@end table
2213
0285c67d
NC
2214@c man end
2215
36f63dca 2216@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2217
0285c67d
NC
2218@c man begin OPTIONS
2219
ff5dcc92 2220The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2221the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2222normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2223use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2224@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2225like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2226symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2227object file).
2228
2229In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2230support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2231PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2232values by either a space or an equals sign.
2233
ff5dcc92 2234@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2235
2236@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2237@item --add-stdcall-alias
2238If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2239as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2240[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2241
2242@kindex --base-file
2243@item --base-file @var{file}
2244Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2245addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2246@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2247[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2248
2249@kindex --dll
2250@item --dll
2251Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2252@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2253file.
bb10df36 2254[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2255
88183869
DK
2256@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2257@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2258@item --enable-long-section-names
2259@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2260The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2261the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2262for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2263fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2264to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2265allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2266disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2267generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2268as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2269with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2270GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2271information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2272option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2273section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2274when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2275image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2276[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2277
252b5132
RH
2278@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2279@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2280@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2281@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2282If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2283do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2284only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2285resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2286undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2287@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2288to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2289warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2290import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2291to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2292feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2293@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2294mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2295[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2296
522f09cd
KT
2297@kindex --leading-underscore
2298@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2299@item --leading-underscore
2300@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2301For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2302in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2303disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2304
252b5132
RH
2305@cindex DLLs, creating
2306@kindex --export-all-symbols
2307@item --export-all-symbols
2308If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2309be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2310otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2311explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2312attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2313option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2314@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2315@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2316exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2317re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2318such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2319@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2320@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2321Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2322not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2323extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2324(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2325These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2326@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2327@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2328@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2329@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2330[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2331
2332@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2333@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2334Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2335exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2336[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2337
2927aaca
NC
2338@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2339@item --exclude-all-symbols
2340Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
252b5132
RH
2343@kindex --file-alignment
2344@item --file-alignment
2345Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2346file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2347512.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2349
2350@cindex heap size
2351@kindex --heap
2352@item --heap @var{reserve}
2353@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2354Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2355to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2356committed.
bb10df36 2357[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2358
2359@cindex image base
2360@kindex --image-base
2361@item --image-base @var{value}
2362Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2363the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2364is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2365your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2366other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2367for dlls.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2369
2370@kindex --kill-at
2371@item --kill-at
2372If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2373symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2374[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2375
26d2d8a2
BF
2376@kindex --large-address-aware
2377@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2378If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2379header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2380greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2381or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2382section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2383[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2384
f69a2f97
NC
2385@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2386@item --disable-large-address-aware
2387Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2388This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2389driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2390addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2391[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2392
252b5132
RH
2393@kindex --major-image-version
2394@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2395Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2396[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2397
2398@kindex --major-os-version
2399@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2400Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2402
2403@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2404@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2405Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2406[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2407
2408@kindex --minor-image-version
2409@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2410Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2411[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2412
2413@kindex --minor-os-version
2414@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2415Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2416[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2417
2418@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2419@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2420Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2421[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2422
2423@cindex DEF files, creating
2424@cindex DLLs, creating
2425@kindex --output-def
2426@item --output-def @var{file}
2427The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2428file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2429(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2430library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2431automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2432[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2433
b044cda1
CW
2434@cindex DLLs, creating
2435@kindex --out-implib
2436@item --out-implib @var{file}
2437The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2438import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2439import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2440may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2441makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2442creation step.
bb10df36 2443[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2444
2445@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2446@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2447@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2448Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2449@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2450By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2451for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2452execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2453[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2454
2455@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2456@item --disable-auto-image-base
2457Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2458user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2459default.
bb10df36 2460[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2461
2462@cindex DLLs, linking to
2463@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2464@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2465When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2466search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2467@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2468between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2469uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2470@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2471[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2472
2473@kindex --enable-auto-import
2474@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2475Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2476DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2477building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2478'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2479to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2480specification published by Microsoft.
2481
e2a83dd0
NC
2482Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2483data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2484placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2485around a problem with consts that is described here:
2486http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2487
4d8907ac
DS
2488Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2489see this message:
0d888aac 2490
ece2d90e 2491"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2492documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2493
ece2d90e
NC
2494This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2495ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2496allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2497fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2498constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2499multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2500this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2501of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2502the warning, and exit.
2503
2504There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2505data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2506
2fa9fc65
NC
2507One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2508of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2509this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2510
c0065db7
RM
2511A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2512that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2513there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2514a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2515
2516@example
2517extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2518extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2519 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2520@end example
2521
2522or
2523
2524@example
2525extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2526extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2527 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2528@end example
2529
c0065db7 2530For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2531is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2532
2533@example
2534extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2535extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2536 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2537@end example
2538
c406afaf
NC
2539or
2540
2541@example
2542extern long long extern_ll;
2543extern_ll -->
2544 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2545@end example
2546
2fa9fc65 2547A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2548'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2549@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2550requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2551building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2552merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2553between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2554constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2555
2556Original:
2557@example
2558--foo.h
2559extern int arr[];
2560--foo.c
2561#include "foo.h"
2562void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2563 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2564@}
2565@end example
2566
2567Solution 1:
2568@example
2569--foo.h
2570extern int arr[];
2571--foo.c
2572#include "foo.h"
2573void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2574 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2575 volatile int *parr = arr;
2576 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2577@}
2578@end example
2579
2580Solution 2:
2581@example
2582--foo.h
2583/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2584#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2585 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2586#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2587#else
2588#define FOO_IMPORT
2589#endif
2590extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2591--foo.c
2592#include "foo.h"
2593void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2594 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2595@}
2596@end example
2597
c0065db7 2598A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2599library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2600for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2601functions).
bb10df36 2602[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2603
2604@kindex --disable-auto-import
2605@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2606Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2607@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2608[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2609
2fa9fc65
NC
2610@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2611@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2612If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2613that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2614a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2615environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2616[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2617
2618@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2619@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2620Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2621DLLs.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2623
b044cda1
CW
2624@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2625@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2626Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2628
252b5132
RH
2629@kindex --section-alignment
2630@item --section-alignment
2631Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2632addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2633[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2634
2635@cindex stack size
2636@kindex --stack
2637@item --stack @var{reserve}
2638@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2639Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2640to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2641committed.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --subsystem
2645@item --subsystem @var{which}
2646@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2647@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2648Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2649legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2650@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2651the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2652@var{which}.
bb10df36 2653[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2654
2f563b51
DK
2655The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2656of the PE file header:
2657[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2658
2d5c3743
NC
2659@kindex --high-entropy-va
2660@item --high-entropy-va
2661Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2662(ASLR).
2663
2f563b51
DK
2664@kindex --dynamicbase
2665@item --dynamicbase
2666The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2667randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2668Vista for i386 PE targets.
2669
2670@kindex --forceinteg
2671@item --forceinteg
2672Code integrity checks are enforced.
2673
2674@kindex --nxcompat
2675@item --nxcompat
2676The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2677This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2678
2679@kindex --no-isolation
2680@item --no-isolation
2681Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2682
2683@kindex --no-seh
2684@item --no-seh
2685The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2686this image.
2687
2688@kindex --no-bind
2689@item --no-bind
2690Do not bind this image.
2691
2692@kindex --wdmdriver
2693@item --wdmdriver
2694The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2695
2f563b51
DK
2696@kindex --tsaware
2697@item --tsaware
2698The image is Terminal Server aware.
2699
0cb112f7
CF
2700@kindex --insert-timestamp
2701@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2702@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2703Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2704as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2705other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2706will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2707same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2708can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2709that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2710identically.
252b5132
RH
2711@end table
2712
0285c67d
NC
2713@c man end
2714
ac145307
BS
2715@ifset C6X
2716@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2717
2718@c man begin OPTIONS
2719
2720The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2721libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2722all executables use an index of 0.
2723
2724@table @gcctabopt
2725
2726@kindex --dsbt-size
2727@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2728This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2729or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2730entries.
2731
2732@kindex --dsbt-index
2733@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2734This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2735to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2736executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2737@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2738
fbd9ad90
PB
2739@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2740The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2741exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2742
ac145307
BS
2743@end table
2744
2745@c man end
2746@end ifset
2747
93fd0973
SC
2748@ifset M68HC11
2749@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2750
2751@c man begin OPTIONS
2752
2753The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2754memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2755
2756@table @gcctabopt
2757
2758@kindex --no-trampoline
2759@item --no-trampoline
2760This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2761is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2762instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2763
2764@kindex --bank-window
2765@item --bank-window @var{name}
2766This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2767the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2768The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2769paging and addresses within the memory window.
2770
2771@end table
2772
2773@c man end
2774@end ifset
2775
7fb9f789
NC
2776@ifset M68K
2777@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2778
2779@c man begin OPTIONS
2780
2781The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2782when linking for 68K targets.
2783
2784@table @gcctabopt
2785
2786@kindex --got
2787@item --got=@var{type}
2788This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2789@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2790@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2791Info entry for @file{ld}.
2792
2793@end table
2794
2795@c man end
2796@end ifset
2797
833794fc
MR
2798@ifset MIPS
2799@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2800
2801@c man begin OPTIONS
2802
2803The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2804generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2805
2806@table @gcctabopt
2807
2808@kindex --insn32
2809@item --insn32
2810@kindex --no-insn32
2811@itemx --no-insn32
2812These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2813generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2814or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
281532-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2816used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2817possible.
2818
2819@end table
2820
2821@c man end
2822@end ifset
2823
252b5132
RH
2824@ifset UsesEnvVars
2825@node Environment
2826@section Environment Variables
2827
0285c67d
NC
2828@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2829
560e09e9 2830You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2831@ifclear SingleFormat
2832@code{GNUTARGET},
2833@end ifclear
2834@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2835
36f63dca 2836@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2837@kindex GNUTARGET
2838@cindex default input format
2839@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2840use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2841of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2842@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2843of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2844attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2845this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2846there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2847object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2848BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2849in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2850@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2851
2852@kindex LDEMULATION
2853@cindex default emulation
2854@cindex emulation, default
2855@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2856@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2857behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2858available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2859the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2860variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2861linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2862
2863@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2864@cindex demangling, default
2865Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2866@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2867default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2868a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2869may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2870options.
2871
0285c67d
NC
2872@c man end
2873@end ifset
2874
252b5132
RH
2875@node Scripts
2876@chapter Linker Scripts
2877
2878@cindex scripts
2879@cindex linker scripts
2880@cindex command files
2881Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2882written in the linker command language.
2883
2884The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2885the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2886the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2887more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2888direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2889described below.
2890
2891The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2892yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2893linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2894to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2895such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2896
2897You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2898line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2899default linker script.
2900
2901You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2902to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2903Linker Scripts}.
2904
2905@menu
2906* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2907* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2908* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2909* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2910* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2911* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2912* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2913* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2914* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2915* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2916* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2917@end menu
2918
2919@node Basic Script Concepts
2920@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2921@cindex linker script concepts
2922We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2923describe the linker script language.
2924
2925The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2926file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2927@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2928The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2929purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2930among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2931section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2932in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2933
2934Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2935also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2936contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2937the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2938A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2939area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2940loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2941which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2942of debugging information.
2943
2944Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2945first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2946the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2947@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2948section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2949same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2950is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2951(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2952based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2953RAM address would be the VMA.
2954
2955You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2956program with the @samp{-h} option.
2957
2958Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2959@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2960has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2961information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2962will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2963static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2964referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2965
2966You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2967program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2968option.
2969
2970@node Script Format
2971@section Linker Script Format
2972@cindex linker script format
2973Linker scripts are text files.
2974
2975You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2976either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2977symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2978generally ignored.
2979
2980Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2981If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2982otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2983double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2984file name.
2985
2986You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2987@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2988to whitespace.
2989
2990@node Simple Example
2991@section Simple Linker Script Example
2992@cindex linker script example
2993@cindex example of linker script
2994Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2995
2996The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2997@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2998memory layout of the output file.
2999
3000The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3001describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3002code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3003@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3004Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3005your input files.
3006
3007For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30080x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3009linker script which will do that:
3010@smallexample
3011SECTIONS
3012@{
3013 . = 0x10000;
3014 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3015 . = 0x8000000;
3016 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3017 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3018@}
3019@end smallexample
3020
3021You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3022followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3023descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3024
252b5132
RH
3025The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3026sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3027counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3028other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3029current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3030incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3031@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3032
3033The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3034required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3035after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3036which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3037wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3038means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3039
3040Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3041@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3042@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3043
3044The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3045the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3046at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3047output section, the value of the location counter will be
3048@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3049effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3050immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3051
3052The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3053alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3054example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3055sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3056may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3057sections.
3058
3059That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3060
3061@node Simple Commands
3062@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3063@cindex linker script simple commands
3064In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3065
3066@menu
3067* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3068* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3069@ifclear SingleFormat
3070* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3071@end ifclear
3072
4a93e180 3073* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3074* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3075@end menu
3076
3077@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3078@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3079@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3080@cindex start of execution
3081@cindex first instruction
3082@cindex entry point
3083The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3084point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3085entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3086@smallexample
3087ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3088@end smallexample
3089
3090There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3091entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3092stopping when one of them succeeds:
3093@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3094@item
252b5132 3095the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3096@item
252b5132 3097the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3098@item
3ab904c4
NC
3099the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3100targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3101check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3102@item
252b5132 3103the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3104@item
252b5132
RH
3105The address @code{0}.
3106@end itemize
3107
3108@node File Commands
36f63dca 3109@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3110@cindex linker script file commands
3111Several linker script commands deal with files.
3112
3113@table @code
3114@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3115@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3116@cindex including a linker script
3117Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3118be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3119with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
312010 levels deep.
3121
4006703d
NS
3122You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3123@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3124
252b5132
RH
3125@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3126@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3127@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3128@cindex input files in linker scripts
3129@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3130@cindex linker script input object files
3131The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3132in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3133
3134For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3135a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3136then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3137
3138In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3139script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3140
e3f2db7f
AO
3141In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3142with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3143located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3144for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3145open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3146linker will search through the archive library search path.
3147The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3148as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3149description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3150
ff5dcc92 3151If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3152name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3153@samp{-l}.
3154
3155When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3156files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3157script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3158
3159@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3160@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3161@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3162@cindex grouping input files
3163The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3164files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3165new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3166in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3167
b717d30e
JJ
3168@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3169@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3170@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3171This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3172commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3173as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3174with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3175when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3176@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3177and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3178setting afterwards.
3179
252b5132
RH
3180@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3181@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3182@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3183The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3184@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3185@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3186Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3187precedence.
3188
3189You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3190output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3191
3192@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3193@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3194@cindex library search path in linker script
3195@cindex archive search path in linker script
3196@cindex search path in linker script
3197The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3198@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3199@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3200on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3201are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3202the command line option are searched first.
3203
3204@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3205@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3206@cindex first input file
3207The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3208that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3209though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3210when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3211first file.
3212@end table
3213
3214@ifclear SingleFormat
3215@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3216@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3217A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3218
3219@table @code
3220@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3221@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3222@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3223@cindex output file format in linker script
3224The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3225output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3226exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3227(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3228line option takes precedence.
3229
3230You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3231formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3232This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3233desired endianness.
3234
3235If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3236will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3237output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3238used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3239
3240For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3241command:
3242@smallexample
3243OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3244@end smallexample
3245This says that the default format for the output file is
3246@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3247option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3248format.
3249
3250@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3251@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3252@cindex input file format in linker script
3253The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3254files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3255This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3256(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3257is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3258command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3259@end table
3260@end ifclear
3261
4a93e180
NC
3262@node REGION_ALIAS
3263@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3264@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3265@cindex region alias
3266@cindex region names
3267
3268Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3269@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3270
3271@smallexample
3272REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3273@end smallexample
3274
3275The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3276memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3277to memory regions. An example follows.
3278
3279Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3280memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3281that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3282non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3283access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3284read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3285sections:
3286
3287@itemize @bullet
3288@item
3289@code{.text} program code;
3290@item
3291@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3292@item
3293@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3294@item
3295@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3296@end itemize
3297
3298The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3299part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3300output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3301systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3302@code{C}:
3303@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3304@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3305@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3306@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3307@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3308@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3309@end multitable
3310The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3311loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3312the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3313the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3314
3315The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3316includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3317memory layout:
3318@smallexample
3319INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3320
3321SECTIONS
3322 @{
3323 .text :
3324 @{
3325 *(.text)
3326 @} > REGION_TEXT
3327 .rodata :
3328 @{
3329 *(.rodata)
3330 rodata_end = .;
3331 @} > REGION_RODATA
3332 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3333 @{
3334 data_start = .;
3335 *(.data)
3336 @} > REGION_DATA
3337 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3338 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3339 .bss :
3340 @{
3341 *(.bss)
3342 @} > REGION_BSS
3343 @}
3344@end smallexample
3345
3346Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3347regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3348variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3349@table @code
3350@item A
3351Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3352@smallexample
3353MEMORY
3354 @{
3355 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3356 @}
3357
3358REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3359REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3360REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3361REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3362@end smallexample
3363@item B
3364Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3365into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3366@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3367@smallexample
3368MEMORY
3369 @{
3370 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3371 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3372 @}
3373
3374REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3375REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3376REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3377REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3378@end smallexample
3379@item C
3380Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3381@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3382initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3383system start into the @code{RAM}.
3384@smallexample
3385MEMORY
3386 @{
3387 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3388 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3389 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3390 @}
3391
3392REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3393REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3394REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3395REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3396@end smallexample
3397@end table
3398
3399It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3400@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3401necessary:
3402@smallexample
3403#include <string.h>
3404
3405extern char data_start [];
3406extern char data_size [];
3407extern char data_load_start [];
3408
3409void copy_data(void)
3410@{
3411 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3412 @{
3413 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3414 @}
3415@}
3416@end smallexample
3417
252b5132 3418@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3419@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3420There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3421
3422@table @code
3423@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3424@kindex ASSERT
3425@cindex assertion in linker script
3426Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3427with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3428
3429@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3430@kindex EXTERN
3431@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3432Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3433symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3434modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3435each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3436command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3437
3438@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3439@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3440@cindex common allocation in linker script
3441This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3442to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3443output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3444
4818e05f
AM
3445@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3446@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3447@cindex common allocation in linker script
3448This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3449command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3450to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3451
53d25da6
AM
3452@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3453@kindex INSERT
3454@cindex insert user script into default script
3455This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3456augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3457inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3458@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3459default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3460sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3461linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3462insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3463linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3464default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3465of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3466to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3467is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3468
3469@smallexample
3470SECTIONS
3471@{
3472 OVERLAY :
3473 @{
3474 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3475 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3476 @}
3477@}
3478INSERT AFTER .text;
3479@end smallexample
3480
252b5132
RH
3481@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3482@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3483@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3484This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3485references among certain output sections.
3486
3487In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3488using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3489will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3490errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3491a function defined in the other section.
3492
3493The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3494@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3495an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3496@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3497names.
3498
3499@ifclear SingleFormat
3500@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3501@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3502@cindex machine architecture
3503@cindex architecture
3504Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3505of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3506architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3507the @samp{-f} option.
3508@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3509
3510@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3511@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3512This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3513@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3514in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3515@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3516@end table
3517
3518@node Assignments
3519@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3520@cindex assignment in scripts
3521@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3522@cindex variables, defining
3523You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3524the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3525
3526@menu
3527* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3528* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3529* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3530* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3531* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3532@end menu
3533
3534@node Simple Assignments
3535@subsection Simple Assignments
3536
3537You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3538
3539@table @code
3540@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3541@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3542@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3543@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3544@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3545@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3546@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3547@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3548@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3549@end table
3550
3551The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3552@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3553defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3554
3555The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3556may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3557
3558The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3559
3560Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3561
3562You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3563statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3564section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3565
3566The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3567expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3568
3569Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3570assignments may be used:
3571
3572@smallexample
3573floating_point = 0;
3574SECTIONS
3575@{
3576 .text :
3577 @{
3578 *(.text)
3579 _etext = .;
3580 @}
156e34dd 3581 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3582 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3583@}
3584@end smallexample
3585@noindent
3586In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3587zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3588the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3589defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3590upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3591
eb8476a6
MR
3592@node HIDDEN
3593@subsection HIDDEN
3594@cindex HIDDEN
3595For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3596exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3597
3598Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3599@code{HIDDEN}:
3600
3601@smallexample
3602HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3603SECTIONS
3604@{
3605 .text :
3606 @{
3607 *(.text)
3608 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3609 @}
3610 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3611 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3612@}
3613@end smallexample
3614@noindent
3615In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3616
252b5132
RH
3617@node PROVIDE
3618@subsection PROVIDE
3619@cindex PROVIDE
3620In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3621only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3622the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3623@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3624@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3625@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3626@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3627@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3628
3629Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3630@smallexample
3631SECTIONS
3632@{
3633 .text :
3634 @{
3635 *(.text)
3636 _etext = .;
3637 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3638 @}
3639@}
3640@end smallexample
3641
3642In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3643underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3644the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3645underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3646If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3647linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3648
7af8e998
L
3649@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3650@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3651@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3652Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3653hidden and won't be exported.
3654
73ae6183
NC
3655@node Source Code Reference
3656@subsection Source Code Reference
3657
3658Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3659intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3660a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3661symbol that does not have a value.
3662
3663Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3664transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3665stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3666prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3667mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3668of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3669variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3670linker script variable might be referred to as:
3671
3672@smallexample
3673 extern int foo;
3674@end smallexample
3675
3676But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3677
3678@smallexample
3679 _foo = 1000;
3680@end smallexample
3681
3682In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3683transformation has taken place.
3684
3685When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3686things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3687in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3688second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3689table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3690contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3691value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3692
3693@smallexample
3694 int foo = 1000;
3695@end smallexample
3696
10bf6894 3697creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3698holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3699number 1000 is initially stored.
3700
3701When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3702first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3703memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3704So:
3705
3706@smallexample
3707 foo = 1;
3708@end smallexample
3709
3710looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3711associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3712address. Whereas:
3713
3714@smallexample
3715 int * a = & foo;
3716@end smallexample
3717
10bf6894 3718looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3719and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3720the variable @samp{a}.
3721
3722Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3723the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3724an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3725
3726@smallexample
3727 foo = 1000;
3728@end smallexample
3729
3730creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3731the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3732address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3733linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3734access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3735
3736Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3737you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3738use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3739section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3740linker script contains these declarations:
3741
3742@smallexample
3743@group
3744 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3745 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3746 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3747@end group
3748@end smallexample
3749
3750Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3751
3752@smallexample
3753@group
3754 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3755
73ae6183
NC
3756 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3757@end group
3758@end smallexample
3759
3760Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3761
252b5132 3762@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3763@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3764@kindex SECTIONS
3765The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3766into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3767
3768The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3769@smallexample
3770SECTIONS
3771@{
3772 @var{sections-command}
3773 @var{sections-command}
3774 @dots{}
3775@}
3776@end smallexample
3777
3778Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3779
3780@itemize @bullet
3781@item
3782an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3783@item
3784a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3785@item
3786an output section description
3787@item
3788an overlay description
3789@end itemize
3790
3791The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3792@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3793those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3794understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3795the layout of the output file.
3796
3797Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3798below.
3799
3800If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3801linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3802section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3803input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3804example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3805in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3806
3807@menu
3808* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3809* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3810* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3811* Input Section:: Input section description
3812* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3813* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3814* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3815* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3816* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3817@end menu
3818
3819@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3820@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3821The full description of an output section looks like this:
3822@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3823@group
7e7d5768 3824@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3825 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3826 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3827 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3828 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3829 @{
3830 @var{output-section-command}
3831 @var{output-section-command}
3832 @dots{}
abc9061b 3833 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3834@end group
3835@end smallexample
3836
3837Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3838
3839The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3840name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3841The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3842the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3843The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3844
3845Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3846
3847@itemize @bullet
3848@item
3849a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3850@item
3851an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3852@item
3853data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3854@item
3855a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3856@end itemize
3857
3858@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3859@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3860@cindex name, section
3861@cindex section name
3862The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3863meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3864support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3865must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3866example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3867output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3868names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3869quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3870characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3871commas must be quoted.
3872
3873The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3874Discarding}.
3875
3876@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3877@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3878@cindex address, section
3879@cindex section address
3880The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3881address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3882is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3883
3884If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3885section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3886to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3887alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3888contained within the output section.
3889
3890The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3891
3892@itemize @bullet
3893@item
3894If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3895is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3896in that region.
3897
3898@item
3899If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3900regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3901section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3902be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3903
3904@item
3905If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3906the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3907counter.
3908@end itemize
3909
3910@noindent
3911For example:
3912
252b5132
RH
3913@smallexample
3914.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3915@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3916
252b5132
RH
3917@noindent
3918and
ea5cae92 3919
252b5132
RH
3920@smallexample
3921.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3922@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3923
252b5132
RH
3924@noindent
3925are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3926@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3927counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3928counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3929input sections.
252b5132
RH
3930
3931The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3932For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3933so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3934do something like this:
3935@smallexample
3936.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3937@end smallexample
3938@noindent
3939This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3940aligned upward to the specified value.
3941
3942Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3943location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3944sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3945
3946@node Input Section
36f63dca 3947@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3948@cindex input sections
3949@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3950The most common output section command is an input section description.
3951
3952The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3953You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3954in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3955map the input files into your memory layout.
3956
3957@menu
3958* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3959* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3960* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3961* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3962* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3963@end menu
3964
3965@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3966@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3967@cindex input section basics
3968An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3969by a list of section names in parentheses.
3970
3971The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3972describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3973
3974The most common input section description is to include all input
3975sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3976include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3977@smallexample
3978*(.text)
3979@end smallexample
3980@noindent
18625d54
CM
3981Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3982of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3983match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3984example:
252b5132 3985@smallexample
b4346c09 3986*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3987@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3988will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3989@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3990
3991There are two ways to include more than one section:
3992@smallexample
3993*(.text .rdata)
3994*(.text) *(.rdata)
3995@end smallexample
3996@noindent
3997The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3998@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3999first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4000they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4001@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4002@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4003
4004You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4005You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4006needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4007@smallexample
4008data.o(.data)
4009@end smallexample
4010
ae17ab41
CM
4011To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4012of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4013
4014Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4015
4016@smallexample
4017@group
4018SECTIONS @{
4019 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4020 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4021@}
4022@end group
4023@end smallexample
4024
4025In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4026input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4027@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4028@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4029whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4030
967928e9
AM
4031You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4032matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4033with no whitespace around the colon.
4034
4035@table @samp
4036@item archive:file
4037matches file within archive
4038@item archive:
4039matches the whole archive
4040@item :file
4041matches file but not one in an archive
4042@end table
4043
4044Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4045wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4046single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4047@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4048within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4049also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4050other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4051from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4052command.
4053
252b5132
RH
4054If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4055the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4056commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4057@smallexample
4058data.o
4059@end smallexample
4060
967928e9
AM
4061When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4062and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4063characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4064name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4065did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4066though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4067@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4068the archive search path.
4069
4070@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4071@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4072@cindex input section wildcards
4073@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4074@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4075@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4076In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4077name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4078
4079The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4080pattern for the file name.
4081
4082The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4083
4084@table @samp
4085@item *
4086matches any number of characters
4087@item ?
4088matches any single character
4089@item [@var{chars}]
4090matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4091character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4092@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4093@item \
4094quotes the following character
4095@end table
4096
4097When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4098will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4099Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4100exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4101@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4102a @samp{/} character.
4103
4104File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4105specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4106does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4107
4108If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4109appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4110will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4111sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4112@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4113@smallexample
4114.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4115.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4116@end smallexample
4117
bcaa7b3e 4118@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4119Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4120in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4121this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4122pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4123@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4124into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4125
bcaa7b3e
L
4126@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4127@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4128difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4129descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4130Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4131reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4132
02ecc8e9
L
4133@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4134@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4135difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4136ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4137encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4138
bcaa7b3e
L
4139@cindex SORT
4140@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4141
4142When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4143can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4144
4145@enumerate
4146@item
4147@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4148It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4149sections have the same name.
4150@item
4151@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4152It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4153sections have the same alignment.
4154@item
c0065db7 4155@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4156treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4157@item
4158@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4159is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4160@item
4161All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4162@end enumerate
4163
4164When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4165section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4166takes precedence over the command line option.
4167
4168If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4169command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4170treated as nested sorting command.
4171
4172@enumerate
4173@item
4174@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4175@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4176@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4177@item
4178@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4179@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4180@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4181@end enumerate
4182
4183If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4184command line option will be ignored.
4185
eda680f8
L
4186@cindex SORT_NONE
4187@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4188section sorting option.
4189
252b5132
RH
4190If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4191@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4192precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4193
4194This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4195files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4196sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4197The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4198with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4199linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4200@smallexample
4201@group
4202SECTIONS @{
4203 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4204 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4205 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4206 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4207@}
4208@end group
4209@end smallexample
4210
4211@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4212@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4213@cindex common symbol placement
4214@cindex uninitialized data placement
4215A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4216file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4217linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4218named @samp{COMMON}.
4219
4220You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4221other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4222particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4223input files are placed in another section.
4224
4225In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4226@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4227@smallexample
4228.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4229@end smallexample
4230
4231@cindex scommon section
4232@cindex small common symbols
4233Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4234example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4235symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4236different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4237the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4238symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4239to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4240locations.
4241
4242@cindex [COMMON]
4243You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4244notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4245@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4246
4247@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4248@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4249@cindex KEEP
4250@cindex garbage collection
4251When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4252it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4253This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4254with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4255@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4256
4257@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4258@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4259The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4260to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4261start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4262@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4263follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4264@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4265@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4266All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4267files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4268
4269@smallexample
4270@group
4271SECTIONS @{
4272 outputa 0x10000 :
4273 @{
4274 all.o
4275 foo.o (.input1)
4276 @}
36f63dca
NC
4277@end group
4278@group
252b5132
RH
4279 outputb :
4280 @{
4281 foo.o (.input2)
4282 foo1.o (.input1)
4283 @}
36f63dca
NC
4284@end group
4285@group
252b5132
RH
4286 outputc :
4287 @{
4288 *(.input1)
4289 *(.input2)
4290 @}
4291@}
4292@end group
a1ab1d2a 4293@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4294
4295@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4296@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4297@cindex data
4298@cindex section data
4299@cindex output section data
4300@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4301@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4302@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4303@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4304@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4305You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4306@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4307an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4308parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4309value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4310counter.
4311
4312The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4313store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4314bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4315stored.
4316
4317For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4318of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4319@smallexample
4320BYTE(1)
4321LONG(addr)
4322@end smallexample
4323
4324When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4325same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4326target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4327@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4328@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4329
4330If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4331which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4332When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4333true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4334endianness of the first input object file.
4335
36f63dca 4336Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4337between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4338@smallexample
4339SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4340@end smallexample
4341whereas this will work:
4342@smallexample
4343SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4344@end smallexample
4345
252b5132
RH
4346@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4347@cindex holes, filling
4348@cindex unspecified memory
4349You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4350current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4351otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4352gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4353with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4354necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4355point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4356than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4357different parts of an output section.
4358
4359This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4360value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4361@smallexample
563e308f 4362FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4363@end smallexample
4364
4365The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4366section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4367part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4368entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4369precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4370expression.
252b5132
RH
4371
4372@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4373@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4374There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4375commands.
4376
4377@table @code
4378@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4379@cindex input filename symbols
4380@cindex filename symbols
4381@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4382The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4383The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4384file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4385the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4386
4387This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4388normally used for any other object file format.
4389
4390@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4391@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4392@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4393@item CONSTRUCTORS
4394When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4395unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4396destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4397arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4398automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4399For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4400linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4401@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4402ignored for other object file formats.
4403
4404The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4405constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4406Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4407the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4408first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4409of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4410compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4411formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4412@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4413the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4414destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4415@code{exit}.
4416
4417For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4418arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4419addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4420and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4421linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4422runtime code expects to see.
4423
4424@smallexample
4425 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4426 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4427 *(.ctors)
4428 LONG(0)
4429 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4430 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4431 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4432 *(.dtors)
4433 LONG(0)
4434 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4435@end smallexample
4436
4437If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4438which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4439are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4440are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4441command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4442@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4443@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4444@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4445
4446Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4447and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4448need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4449scripts.
4450
4451@end table
4452
4453@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4454@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4455@cindex discarding sections
4456@cindex sections, discarding
4457@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4458The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4459This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4460may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4461@smallexample
49c13adb 4462.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4463@end smallexample
4464@noindent
4465will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4466@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4467sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4468space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4469too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4470space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4471@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4472@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4473This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4474
a0976ea4 4475The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4476on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4477symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4478the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4479section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4480
4481@cindex /DISCARD/
4482The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4483input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4484section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4485
4486@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4487@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4488@cindex output section attributes
4489We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4490like this:
0c71d759 4491
252b5132 4492@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4493@group
7e7d5768 4494@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4495 [AT(@var{lma})]
4496 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4497 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4498 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4499 @{
4500 @var{output-section-command}
4501 @var{output-section-command}
4502 @dots{}
562d3460 4503 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4504@end group
4505@end smallexample
0c71d759 4506
252b5132
RH
4507We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4508@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4509remaining section attributes.
4510
a1ab1d2a 4511@menu
252b5132
RH
4512* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4513* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4514* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4515* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4516* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4517* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4518* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4519* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4520@end menu
4521
4522@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4523@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4524Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4525parentheses. The following types are defined:
4526
4527@table @code
4528@item NOLOAD
4529The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4530loaded into memory when the program is run.
4531@item DSECT
4532@itemx COPY
4533@itemx INFO
4534@itemx OVERLAY
4535These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4536rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4537marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4538section when the program is run.
4539@end table
4540
4541@kindex NOLOAD
4542@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4543@cindex loading, preventing
4544The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4545the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4546the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4547@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4548need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4549@smallexample
4550@group
4551SECTIONS @{
4552 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4553 @dots{}
4554@}
4555@end group
4556@end smallexample
4557
4558@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4559@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4560@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4561@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4562@cindex load address
4563@cindex section load address
4564Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4565@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4566@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4567specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4568address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4569
ea5cae92
NC
4570The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4571specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4572takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4573load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4574region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4575
4576If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4577section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4578load address:
4579
4580@itemize @bullet
4581@item
4582If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4583the LMA address as well.
4584
4585@item
4586If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4587
4588@item
4589Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4590with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4591section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4592VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4593the last section in the located region.
4594
4595@item
4596If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4597that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4598
4599@item
4600If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4601section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4602@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4603
4604@cindex ROM initialized data
4605@cindex initialized data in ROM
4606This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4607example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4608called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4609@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4610even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4611uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4612defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4613counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4614
4615@smallexample
4616@group
4617SECTIONS
4618 @{
4619 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4620 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4621 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4622 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4623 .bss 0x3000 :
4624 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4625@}
4626@end group
4627@end smallexample
4628
4629The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4630this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4631the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4632how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4633script.
4634
4635@smallexample
4636@group
4637extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4638char *src = &_etext;
4639char *dst = &_data;
4640
ea5cae92
NC
4641/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4642while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4643 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4644
ea5cae92 4645/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4646for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4647 *dst = 0;
4648@end group
4649@end smallexample
4650
bbf115d3
L
4651@node Forced Output Alignment
4652@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4653@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4654@cindex forcing output section alignment
4655@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4656You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4657alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4658intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4659
7e7d5768
AM
4660@node Forced Input Alignment
4661@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4662@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4663@cindex forcing input section alignment
4664@cindex input section alignment
4665You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4666SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4667sections, whether larger or smaller.
4668
0c71d759
NC
4669@node Output Section Constraint
4670@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4671@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4672@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4673@cindex constraints on output sections
4674You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4675of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4676read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4677@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4678
252b5132 4679@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4680@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4681@kindex >@var{region}
4682@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4683@cindex memory regions and sections
4684You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4685using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4686
4687Here is a simple example:
4688@smallexample
4689@group
4690MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4691SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4692@end group
4693@end smallexample
4694
4695@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4696@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4697@kindex :@var{phdr}
4698@cindex section, assigning to program header
4699@cindex program headers and sections
4700You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4701using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4702one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4703assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4704@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4705linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4706
4707Here is a simple example:
4708@smallexample
4709@group
4710PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4711SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4712@end group
4713@end smallexample
4714
4715@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4716@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4717@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4718@cindex section fill pattern
4719@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4720You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4721@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4722(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4723within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4724alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4725necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4726of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4727an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4728fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4729other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4730pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4731expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4732
4733You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4734output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4735
4736Here is a simple example:
4737@smallexample
4738@group
563e308f 4739SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4740@end group
4741@end smallexample
4742
4743@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4744@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4745@kindex OVERLAY
4746@cindex overlays
4747An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4748are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4749the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4750copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4751required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4752can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4753than another.
4754
4755Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4756@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4757output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4758command is as follows:
4759@smallexample
4760@group
4761OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4762 @{
4763 @var{secname1}
4764 @{
4765 @var{output-section-command}
4766 @var{output-section-command}
4767 @dots{}
4768 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4769 @var{secname2}
4770 @{
4771 @var{output-section-command}
4772 @var{output-section-command}
4773 @dots{}
4774 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4775 @dots{}
abc9061b 4776 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4777@end group
4778@end smallexample
4779
4780Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4781section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4782section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4783those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4784except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4785sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4786
abc9061b
CC
4787The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4788the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4789
252b5132
RH
4790The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4791addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4792memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4793whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4794and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4795and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4796
56dd11f0
NC
4797If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4798references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4799the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4800sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4801@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4802
4803For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4804provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4805defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4806@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4807the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4808within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4809symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4810
4811At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4812the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4813
4814Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4815@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4816@smallexample
4817@group
4818 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4819 @{
4820 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4821 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4822 @}
4823@end group
4824@end smallexample
4825@noindent
4826This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4827address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4828@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4829following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4830@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4831@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4832
4833C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4834like the following.
4835
4836@smallexample
4837@group
4838 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4839 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4840 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4841@end group
4842@end smallexample
4843
4844Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4845everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4846example could have been written identically as follows.
4847
4848@smallexample
4849@group
4850 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4851 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4852 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4853 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4854 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4855 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4856 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4857@end group
4858@end smallexample
4859
4860@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4861@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4862@kindex MEMORY
4863@cindex memory regions
4864@cindex regions of memory
4865@cindex allocating memory
4866@cindex discontinuous memory
4867The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4868memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4869
4870The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4871memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4872may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4873can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4874set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4875regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4876around to fit into the available regions.
4877
4878A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4879command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4880you wish. The syntax is:
4881@smallexample
4882@group
a1ab1d2a 4883MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4884 @{
4885 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4886 @dots{}
4887 @}
4888@end group
4889@end smallexample
4890
4891The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4892region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4893Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4894with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4895must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4896add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4897command.
252b5132
RH
4898
4899@cindex memory region attributes
4900The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4901whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4902not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4903@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4904section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4905the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4906them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4907
4908The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4909@table @samp
4910@item R
4911Read-only section
4912@item W
4913Read/write section
4914@item X
4915Executable section
4916@item A
4917Allocatable section
4918@item I
4919Initialized section
4920@item L
4921Same as @samp{I}
4922@item !
c09e9a8c 4923Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4924@end table
4925
4926If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4927@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4928attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4929in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4930attributes.
4931
4932@kindex ORIGIN =
4933@kindex o =
4934@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4935The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4936the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4937cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4938abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4939@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4940
4941@kindex LENGTH =
4942@kindex len =
4943@kindex l =
4944The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4945region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4946be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4947@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4948
4949In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4950available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4951and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4952linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4953is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4954or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4955explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4956region.
4957
4958@smallexample
4959@group
a1ab1d2a 4960MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4961 @{
4962 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4963 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4964 @}
4965@end group
4966@end smallexample
4967
4968Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4969specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4970@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4971a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4972output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4973was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4974the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4975output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4976region, the linker will issue an error message.
4977
3ec57632 4978It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4979expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4980@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4981
4982@smallexample
4983@group
c0065db7 4984 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4985@end group
4986@end smallexample
4987
252b5132
RH
4988@node PHDRS
4989@section PHDRS Command
4990@kindex PHDRS
4991@cindex program headers
4992@cindex ELF program headers
4993@cindex program segments
4994@cindex segments, ELF
4995The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4996@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4997loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4998program with the @samp{-p} option.
4999
5000When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5001reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5002program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5003This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5004interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5005
5006The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5007in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5008precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5009the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5010not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5011
5012The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5013generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5014ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5015
5016This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5017@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5018
5019@smallexample
5020@group
5021PHDRS
5022@{
5023 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5024 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5025@}
5026@end group
5027@end smallexample
5028
5029The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5030of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5031header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5032with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5033must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5034is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5035
5036Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5037system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5038specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5039sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5040attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5041Section Phdr}.
5042
5043It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5044merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5045repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5046contain the section.
5047
5048If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5049then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5050not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5051convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5052placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5053default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5054segment at all.
5055
5056@kindex FILEHDR
5057@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5058You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5059the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5060The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5061file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5062include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5063segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5064these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5065
5066The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5067value of the keyword.
5068
5069@table @asis
5070@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5071Indicates an unused program header.
5072
5073@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5074Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5075the file.
5076
5077@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5078Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5079
5080@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5081Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5082found.
5083
5084@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5085Indicates a segment holding note information.
5086
5087@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5088A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5089ABI.
5090
5091@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5092Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5093
5094@item @var{expression}
5095An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5096be used for types not defined above.
5097@end table
5098
5099You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5100in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5101@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5102Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5103output section attribute.
5104
5105The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5106which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5107explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5108an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5109header.
5110
5111Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5112headers used on a native ELF system.
5113
5114@example
5115@group
5116PHDRS
5117@{
5118 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5119 interp PT_INTERP ;
5120 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5121 data PT_LOAD ;
5122 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5123@}
5124
5125SECTIONS
5126@{
5127 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5128 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5129 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5130 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5131 @dots{}
5132 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5133 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5134 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5135 @dots{}
5136@}
5137@end group
5138@end example
5139
5140@node VERSION
5141@section VERSION Command
5142@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5143@cindex symbol versions
5144@cindex version script
5145@cindex versions of symbols
5146The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5147only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5148symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5149a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5150shared library.
5151
5152You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5153you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5154also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5155
5156The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5157@smallexample
5158VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5159@end smallexample
5160
5161The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5162Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5163version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5164version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5165version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5166scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5167library.
5168
5169The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5170examples.
5171
5172@smallexample
5173VERS_1.1 @{
5174 global:
5175 foo1;
5176 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5177 old*;
5178 original*;
5179 new*;
252b5132
RH
5180@};
5181
5182VERS_1.2 @{
5183 foo2;
5184@} VERS_1.1;
5185
5186VERS_2.0 @{
5187 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5188 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5189 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5190 "f(int, double)";
5191 @};
252b5132
RH
5192@} VERS_1.2;
5193@end smallexample
5194
5195This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5196version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5197The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5198a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5199of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5200symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5201is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5202in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5203However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5204name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5205
5206Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5207depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5208to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5209
5210Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5211depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5212and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5213
5214When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5215specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5216unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5217unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5218somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5219wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5220wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5221set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5222ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5223
5224The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5225they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5226could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5227However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5228
0f6bf451 5229Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5230in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5231symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5232won't.
5233
5234@smallexample
7c9c73be 5235@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5236@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5237
252b5132
RH
5238When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5239symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5240requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5241shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5242loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5243linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5244application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5245way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5246all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5247search for each symbol reference.
5248
5249The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5250doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5251that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5252functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5253the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5254required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5255that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5256versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5257the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5258
5259There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5260first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5261source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5262script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5263maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5264@smallexample
5265__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5266@end smallexample
5267@noindent
5268in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5269be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5270The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5271@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5272takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5273
5274The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5275function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5276an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5277version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5278linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5279
5280To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5281source file. Here is an example:
5282
5283@smallexample
5284__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5285__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5286__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5287__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5288@end smallexample
5289
5290In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5291unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5292example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5293@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5294
5295When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5296some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5297this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5298@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5299declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5300you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5301
5302If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5303within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5304(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5305specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5306
cb840a31
L
5307You can also specify the language in the version script:
5308
5309@smallexample
5310VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5311@end smallexample
5312
c0065db7 5313The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5314The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5315demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5316patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5317@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5318
86043bbb
MM
5319Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5320described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5321or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5322the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5323whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5324cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5325might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5326should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5327expect when you upgrade.
5328
252b5132
RH
5329@node Expressions
5330@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5331@cindex expressions
5332@cindex arithmetic
5333The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5334that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5335expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5336host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5337
5338You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5339
5340The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5341expressions.
5342
5343@menu
5344* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5345* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5346* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5347* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5348* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5349* Operators:: Operators
5350* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5351* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5352* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5353@end menu
5354
5355@node Constants
5356@subsection Constants
5357@cindex integer notation
5358@cindex constants in linker scripts
5359All constants are integers.
5360
5361As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5362octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5363hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5364@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5365@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5366value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5367
5368@cindex scaled integers
5369@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5370@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5371@cindex suffixes for integers
5372@cindex integer suffixes
5373In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5374constant by
5375@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5376@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5377@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5378@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5379@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5380@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5381@tex
5382${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5383@end tex
5384@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5385respectively. For example, the following
5386all refer to the same quantity:
5387
252b5132 5388@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5389_fourk_1 = 4K;
5390_fourk_2 = 4096;
5391_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5392_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5393@end smallexample
5394
8a308ae8
NC
5395Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5396conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5397
0c71d759
NC
5398@node Symbolic Constants
5399@subsection Symbolic Constants
5400@cindex symbolic constants
5401@kindex CONSTANT
5402It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5403the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5404
5405@table @code
5406@item MAXPAGESIZE
5407@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5408The target's maximum page size.
5409
5410@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5411@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5412The target's default page size.
5413@end table
5414
5415So for example:
5416
5417@smallexample
9d5777a3 5418 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5419@end smallexample
5420
5421will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5422supported by the target.
5423
252b5132
RH
5424@node Symbols
5425@subsection Symbol Names
5426@cindex symbol names
5427@cindex names
5428@cindex quoted symbol names
5429@kindex "
5430Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5431and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5432Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5433specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5434keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5435@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5436"SECTION" = 9;
5437"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5438@end smallexample
5439
5440Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5441to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5442whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5443
ecca9871
L
5444@node Orphan Sections
5445@subsection Orphan Sections
5446@cindex orphan
5447Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5448are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5449script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5450output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5451placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5452attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5453same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5454If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5455at the end of the file.
5456
5457For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5458well as section flag.
5459
41911f68 5460If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5461the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5462__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5463section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5464orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5465representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5466character.
5467
252b5132
RH
5468@node Location Counter
5469@subsection The Location Counter
5470@kindex .
5471@cindex dot
5472@cindex location counter
5473@cindex current output location
5474The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5475current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5476location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5477within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5478anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5479
5480@cindex holes
5481Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5482moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5483location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5484and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5485doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5486
5487@smallexample
5488SECTIONS
5489@{
5490 output :
5491 @{
5492 file1(.text)
5493 . = . + 1000;
5494 file2(.text)
5495 . += 1000;
5496 file3(.text)
563e308f 5497 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5498@}
5499@end smallexample
5500@noindent
5501In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5502located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5503followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5504@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5505@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5506specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5507
5c6bbab8
NC
5508@cindex dot inside sections
5509Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5510current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5511statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5512absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5513however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5514not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5515
5516@smallexample
5517SECTIONS
5518@{
5519 . = 0x100
5520 .text: @{
5521 *(.text)
5522 . = 0x200
5523 @}
5524 . = 0x500
5525 .data: @{
5526 *(.data)
5527 . += 0x600
5528 @}
5529@}
5530@end smallexample
5531
5532The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5533and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5534the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5535much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5536move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5537and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5538the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5539the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5540
b5666f2f
AM
5541@cindex dot outside sections
5542Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5543output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5544needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5545
5546@smallexample
5547SECTIONS
5548@{
5549 start_of_text = . ;
5550 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5551 end_of_text = . ;
5552
5553 start_of_data = . ;
5554 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5555 end_of_data = . ;
5556@}
5557@end smallexample
5558
5559If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5560not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5561between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5562should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5563blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5564the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5565sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5566statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5567special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5568place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5569as follows:
5570
5571@smallexample
5572SECTIONS
5573@{
5574 start_of_text = . ;
5575 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5576 end_of_text = . ;
5577
5578 start_of_data = . ;
5579 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5580 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5581 end_of_data = . ;
5582@}
5583@end smallexample
5584
5585This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5586@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5587placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5588assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5589a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5590section. So you could write:
5591
5592@smallexample
5593SECTIONS
5594@{
5595 start_of_text = . ;
5596 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5597 end_of_text = . ;
5598
5599 . = . ;
5600 start_of_data = . ;
5601 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5602 end_of_data = . ;
5603@}
5604@end smallexample
5605
5606Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5607@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5608
252b5132
RH
5609@need 2000
5610@node Operators
5611@subsection Operators
5612@cindex operators for arithmetic
5613@cindex arithmetic operators
5614@cindex precedence in expressions
5615The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5616the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5617@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5618@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5619@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5620@smallexample
5621precedence associativity Operators Notes
5622(highest)
56231 left ! - ~ (1)
56242 left * / %
56253 left + -
56264 left >> <<
56275 left == != > < <= >=
56286 left &
56297 left |
56308 left &&
56319 left ||
563210 right ? :
563311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5634(lowest)
5635@end smallexample
5636Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5637(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5638(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5639@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5640@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5641@tex
5642\vskip \baselineskip
5643%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5644\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5645\hrule
5646\halign
5647{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5648height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5649&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5650height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5651\noalign{\hrule}
5652height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5653&highest&&&&&\cr
5654% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5655&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5656&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5657&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5658&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5659&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5660&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5661&7&&left&&|&\cr
5662&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5663&9&&left&&||&\cr
5664&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5665&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5666&lowest&&&&&\cr
5667height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5668\hrule}
5669@end tex
5670@iftex
5671{
5672@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5673@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5674@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5675}
5676@end iftex
5677@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5678
5679@node Evaluation
5680@subsection Evaluation
5681@cindex lazy evaluation
5682@cindex expression evaluation order
5683The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5684an expression when absolutely necessary.
5685
5686The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5687address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5688regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5689as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5690
5691However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5692until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5693other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5694for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5695
5696The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5697assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5698allocation.
5699
5700Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5701@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5702
5703If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5704available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5705following
5706@smallexample
5707@group
5708SECTIONS
5709 @{
a1ab1d2a 5710 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5711 @{ *(.text) @}
5712 @}
5713@end group
5714@end smallexample
5715@noindent
5716will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5717address}.
5718
5719@node Expression Section
5720@subsection The Section of an Expression
5721@cindex expression sections
5722@cindex absolute expressions
5723@cindex relative expressions
5724@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5725@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5726@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5727Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5728relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5729using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5730value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5731symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5732operations.
5733
abf4be64
AM
5734Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5735section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5736address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5737@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5738functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5739One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5740(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5741differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5742versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5743section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5744Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5745absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5746given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5747everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5748
5749In the following simple example,
252b5132 5750
7542af2a
AM
5751@smallexample
5752@group
5753SECTIONS
5754 @{
5755 . = 0x100;
5756 __executable_start = 0x100;
5757 .data :
5758 @{
5759 . = 0x10;
5760 __data_start = 0x10;
5761 *(.data)
5762 @}
5763 @dots{}
5764 @}
5765@end group
5766@end smallexample
252b5132 5767
7542af2a
AM
5768both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5769address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5770@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5771section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5772
5c3049d2
AM
5773For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5774addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5775
5776@itemize @bullet
5777@item
c05f749e
AM
5778Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5779operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5780absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5781@item
7542af2a
AM
5782Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5783relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5784and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5785@item
c05f749e
AM
5786Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5787in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5788address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5789before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5790@end itemize
5791
5792The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5793
5794@itemize @bullet
5795@item
5796An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5797@item
5798The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5799@item
9bc8bb33 5800The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5801relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5802(after above conversions) is also a number.
5803@item
5804The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5805relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5806section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5807@item
5808The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5809conversions) is an absolute address.
5810@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5811
5812You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5813to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5814create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5815section @samp{.data}:
5816@smallexample
5817SECTIONS
5818 @{
5819 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5820 @}
5821@end smallexample
5822@noindent
5823If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5824@samp{.data} section.
5825
7542af2a
AM
5826Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5827particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5828
252b5132
RH
5829@node Builtin Functions
5830@subsection Builtin Functions
5831@cindex functions in expressions
5832The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5833use in linker script expressions.
5834
5835@table @code
5836@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5837@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5838@cindex expression, absolute
5839Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5840of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5841value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5842normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5843
5844@item ADDR(@var{section})
5845@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5846@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5847Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5848script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5849the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5850@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5851@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5852the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5853@smallexample
5854@group
5855SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5856 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5857 @{
252b5132
RH
5858 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5859 @dots{}
5860 @}
5861 .output :
5862 @{
5863 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5864 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5865 @}
5866@dots{} @}
5867@end group
5868@end smallexample
5869
876f4090
NS
5870@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5871@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5872@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5873@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5874@cindex round up location counter
5875@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5876@cindex round up expression
5877@cindex align expression
5878Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5879to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5880doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5881arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5882expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5883equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5884
5885Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5886next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5887variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5888input sections:
252b5132
RH
5889@smallexample
5890@group
5891SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5892 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5893 *(.data)
5894 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5895 @}
5896@dots{} @}
5897@end group
5898@end smallexample
5899@noindent
5900The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5901a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5902a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5903of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5904
5905The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5906
362c1d1a
NS
5907@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5908@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5909@cindex section alignment
5910Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5911been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5912evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5913the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5914value in that section.
5915@smallexample
5916@group
5917SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5918 .output @{
5919 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5920 @dots{}
5921 @}
5922@dots{} @}
5923@end group
5924@end smallexample
5925
252b5132
RH
5926@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5927@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5928This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5929scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5930section.
5931
2d20f7bf
JJ
5932@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5933@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5934This is equivalent to either
5935@smallexample
5936(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5937@end smallexample
5938or
5939@smallexample
5940(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5941@end smallexample
5942@noindent
5943depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5944for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5945@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5946If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5947memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5948bytes in the on-disk file.
5949
5950This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5951any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5952@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5953be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5954working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5955
5956@noindent
5957Example:
5958@smallexample
5959 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5960@end smallexample
5961
5962@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5963@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5964This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5965evaluation purposes.
5966
5967@smallexample
5968 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5969@end smallexample
5970
a4f5ad88
JJ
5971@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5972@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5973This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5974@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5975When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5976does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5977@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5978boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5979it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5980@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5981padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5982section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5983
5984@smallexample
5985 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5986@end smallexample
5987
252b5132
RH
5988@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5989@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5990@cindex symbol defaults
5991Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5992defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5993return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5994default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5995shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5996the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5997existed, its value is preserved:
5998
5999@smallexample
6000@group
6001SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6002 .text : @{
6003 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6004 @dots{}
6005 @}
6006 @dots{}
6007@}
6008@end group
6009@end smallexample
6010
3ec57632
NC
6011@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6012@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6013Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6014
252b5132
RH
6015@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6016@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6017@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6018Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6019Section LMA}).
6020
2e53f7d6
NC
6021@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6022@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6023Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6024@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6025
252b5132
RH
6026@kindex MAX
6027@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6028Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6029
6030@kindex MIN
6031@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6032Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6033
6034@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6035@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6036@cindex unallocated address, next
6037Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6038This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6039use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6040output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6041
3ec57632
NC
6042@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6043@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6044Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6045
ba916c8a
MM
6046@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6047@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6048Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6049value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6050@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6051will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6052can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6053``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6054name.
6055
252b5132
RH
6056@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6057@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6058@cindex section size
6059Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6060been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6061evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6062@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6063@smallexample
6064@group
6065SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6066 .output @{
6067 .start = . ;
6068 @dots{}
6069 .end = . ;
6070 @}
6071 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6072 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6073@dots{} @}
6074@end group
6075@end smallexample
6076
6077@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6078@itemx sizeof_headers
6079@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6080@cindex header size
6081Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6082information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6083this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6084choose, to facilitate paging.
6085
6086@cindex not enough room for program headers
6087@cindex program headers, not enough room
6088When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6089@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6090number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6091addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6092additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6093room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6094the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6095script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6096you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6097command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6098@end table
6099
6100@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6101@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6102@cindex implicit linker scripts
6103If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6104an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6105linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6106linker will report an error.
6107
6108An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6109
6110Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6111assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6112commands.
6113
6114Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6115at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6116read. This can affect archive searching.
6117
6118@ifset GENERIC
6119@node Machine Dependent
6120@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6121
6122@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6123@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6124sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6125functionality are not listed.
6126
6127@menu
36f63dca
NC
6128@ifset H8300
6129* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6130@end ifset
6131@ifset I960
6132* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6133@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6134@ifset M68HC11
6135* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6136@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6137@ifset ARM
6138* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6139@end ifset
6140@ifset HPPA
6141* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6142@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6143@ifset M68K
6144* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6145@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6146@ifset MIPS
6147* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6148@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6149@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6150* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6151@end ifset
2469cfa2 6152@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6153* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6154@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6155@ifset NDS32
6156* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6157@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6158@ifset NIOSII
6159* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6160@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6161@ifset POWERPC
6162* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6163@end ifset
6164@ifset POWERPC64
6165* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6166@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6167@ifset SPU
6168* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6169@end ifset
74459f0e 6170@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6171* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6172@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6173@ifset WIN32
6174* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6175@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6176@ifset XTENSA
6177* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6178@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6179@end menu
6180@end ifset
6181
252b5132
RH
6182@ifset H8300
6183@ifclear GENERIC
6184@raisesections
6185@end ifclear
6186
6187@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6188@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6189
6190@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6191For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6192you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6193
6194@table @emph
6195@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6196@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6197@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6198targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6199program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6200respectively.
6201
6202@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6203@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6204@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6205@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6206sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6207page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6208(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6209@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6210top page of memory).
1502569c 6211
81f5558e
NC
6212@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6213indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6214displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6215the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6216@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6217whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6218range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6219
1502569c 6220@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6221@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6222biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6223which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6224page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6225(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6226@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6227the top page of memory).
6228
6229@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6230@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
623132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6232changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6233(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6234@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6235the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6236@end table
6237
6238@ifclear GENERIC
6239@lowersections
6240@end ifclear
6241@end ifset
6242
36f63dca 6243@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6244@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6245@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6246@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6247@node Renesas
6248@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6249
c2dcd04e
NC
6250@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6251H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6252options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6253@end ifset
6254@end ifclear
6255
6256@ifset I960
6257@ifclear GENERIC
6258@raisesections
6259@end ifclear
6260
6261@node i960
6262@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6263
6264@cindex i960 support
6265
6266You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6267specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6268family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6269incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6270linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6271libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6272search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6273
6274For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6275well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6276paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6277the names
6278
6279@smallexample
6280@group
6281try
6282libtry.a
6283tryca
6284libtryca.a
6285@end group
6286@end smallexample
6287
6288@noindent
6289The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6290two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6291
6292You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6293the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6294use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6295specifies a library.
6296
6297@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6298@cindex relaxing on i960
6299@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6300you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6301@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6302them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6303instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6304instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6305target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6306not itself call any subroutines).
6307
6308@ifclear GENERIC
6309@lowersections
6310@end ifclear
6311@end ifset
6312
6313@ifset ARM
6314@ifclear GENERIC
6315@raisesections
6316@end ifclear
6317
93fd0973
SC
6318@ifset M68HC11
6319@ifclear GENERIC
6320@raisesections
6321@end ifclear
6322
6323@node M68HC11/68HC12
6324@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6325
6326@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6327
6328@subsection Linker Relaxation
6329
6330For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6331optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6332
6333@table @emph
6334@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6335@item relaxing address modes
6336@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6337targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6338program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6339respectively.
6340
6341@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6342transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6343page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6344
6345@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6346When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6347of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6348addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6349@code{bset} instructions.
6350
6351@end table
6352
6353@subsection Trampoline Generation
6354
6355@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6356@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6357For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6358call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6359will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6360trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6361case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6362point to the function trampoline.
6363
6364@ifclear GENERIC
6365@lowersections
6366@end ifclear
6367@end ifset
6368
36f63dca 6369@node ARM
3674e28a 6370@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6371
6372@cindex ARM interworking support
6373@kindex --support-old-code
6374For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6375between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6376been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6377line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6378libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6379option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6380given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6381which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6382the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6383non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6384
6385@cindex thumb entry point
6386@cindex entry point, thumb
6387@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6388The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6389@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6390But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6391branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6392executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6393
ce11ba6c
KT
6394@cindex PE import table prefixing
6395@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6396The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6397the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6398element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6399import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6400
e489d0ae
PB
6401@cindex BE8
6402@kindex --be8
6403The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6404executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6405The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6406
3674e28a
PB
6407@cindex TARGET1
6408@kindex --target1-rel
6409@kindex --target1-abs
6410The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6411@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6412or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6413and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6414
6415@cindex TARGET2
6416@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6417The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6418@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6419meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6420@table @samp
6421@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6422@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6423@item abs
6424@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6425@item got-rel
6426@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6427@end table
6428
319850b4
JB
6429@cindex FIX_V4BX
6430@kindex --fix-v4bx
6431The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6432specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6433interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6434also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6435
6436In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6437linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6438@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6439
6440In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6441relocations are ignored.
6442
845b51d6
PB
6443@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6444@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6445Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6446relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6447
6448@smallexample
6449TST rM, #1
6450MOVEQ PC, rM
6451BX Rn
6452@end smallexample
6453
6454This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6455and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6456condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6457
33bfe774
JB
6458@cindex USE_BLX
6459@kindex --use-blx
6460The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6461BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6462situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6463code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6464each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6465
6466This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6467specify it if you are using that target.
6468
c6dd86c6
JB
6469@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6470@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6471The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6472bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6473instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6474to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6475the support code can read the intended values.
6476
6477The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6478intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6479and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6480intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6481full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6482you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6483
6484If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6485enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6486@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6487mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6488vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6489@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6490
6491If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6492potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6493such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6494first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6495instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6496the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6497are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6498
2de70689
MGD
6499@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6500@kindex --fix-arm1176
6501@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6502The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6503in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6504are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6505unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6506
9d5777a3 6507Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6508Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6509http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6510
bf21ed78
MS
6511@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6512@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6513The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6514warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6515enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6516linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6517using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6518not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6519
6520@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6521@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6522The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6523warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6524@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6525linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6526using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6527
726150b7
NC
6528@cindex PIC_VENEER
6529@kindex --pic-veneer
6530The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6531ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6532is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6533@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6534
6535@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6536@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6537The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6538code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6539perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6540placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6541controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6542The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6543duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6544group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6545code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6546where they should be placed.
6547
6548The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6549@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6550placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6551branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6552placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6553value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6554exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6555A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6556linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6557from the input sections.
6558
6559The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6560@samp{N = +1}.
6561
1a51c1a4
NC
6562Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6563only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6564otherwise.
6565
1db37fe6
YG
6566@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6567@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6568@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6569The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6570
6571The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6572
6573@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6574@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6575@cindex Merging exidx entries
6576The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6577
6578@kindex --long-plt
6579@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6580The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6581which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6582entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6583
36f63dca
NC
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@lowersections
6586@end ifclear
6587@end ifset
6588
6589@ifset HPPA
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@raisesections
6592@end ifclear
6593
6594@node HPPA ELF32
6595@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6596@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6597@kindex --multi-subspace
6598When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6599import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6600The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6601stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6602multiple sub-spaces.
6603
6604@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6605@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6606Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6607stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6608@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6609sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6610a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6611the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6612conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6613prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6614A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6615branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6616@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6617@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6618detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6619positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6620
6621Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6622single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6623create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6624large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6625
6626@ifclear GENERIC
6627@lowersections
6628@end ifclear
6629@end ifset
6630
7fb9f789
NC
6631@ifset M68K
6632@ifclear GENERIC
6633@raisesections
6634@end ifclear
6635
6636@node M68K
6637@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6638
6639@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6640@kindex --got=@var{type}
6641The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6642The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6643@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6644the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6645@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6646entries only at non-negative offsets.
6647@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6648entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6649support such GOTs.
6650@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6651output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6652file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6653files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6654
6655@ifclear GENERIC
6656@lowersections
6657@end ifclear
6658@end ifset
6659
833794fc
MR
6660@ifset MIPS
6661@ifclear GENERIC
6662@raisesections
6663@end ifclear
6664
6665@node MIPS
6666@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6667
6668@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6669@kindex --insn32
6670@kindex --no-insn32
6671The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6672microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6673in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6674used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6675or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6676including 16-bit ones where possible.
6677
6678@ifclear GENERIC
6679@lowersections
6680@end ifclear
6681@end ifset
6682
36f63dca
NC
6683@ifset MMIX
6684@ifclear GENERIC
6685@raisesections
6686@end ifclear
6687
6688@node MMIX
6689@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6690For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6691@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6692understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6693can translate between the two formats.
6694
6695There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6696Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6697registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6698equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6699@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6700global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6701this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6702symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6703
7a2de473
HPN
6704Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6705@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6706The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6707of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6708
6709Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6710are left out from an mmo file.
6711
6712@ifclear GENERIC
6713@lowersections
6714@end ifclear
6715@end ifset
6716
6717@ifset MSP430
6718@ifclear GENERIC
6719@raisesections
6720@end ifclear
6721
6722@node MSP430
6723@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6724For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6725will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6726just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6727
6728@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6729The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6730
6731@table @code
6732@item @samp{.vectors}
6733Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6734
6735@item @samp{.bootloader}
6736Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6737in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6738
6739@item @samp{.infomem}
6740Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6741this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6742
c0065db7 6743@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6744This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6745in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6746
6747@item @samp{.noinit}
6748Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6749
c0065db7 6750The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6751@end table
6752
6753@ifclear GENERIC
6754@lowersections
6755@end ifclear
6756@end ifset
6757
35c08157
KLC
6758@ifset NDS32
6759@ifclear GENERIC
6760@raisesections
6761@end ifclear
6762
6763@node NDS32
6764@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6765@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6766For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6767relaxes objects according to these options.
6768
6769@table @code
6770@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6771Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6772
6773@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6774Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6775
6776@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6777Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6778
6779@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6780Export the EX9 table after linking.
6781
6782@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6783Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6784
6785@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6786Update the existing EX9 table.
6787
6788@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6789Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6790
6791@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6792Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6793
6794@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6795Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6796
6797@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6798Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6799@end table
6800
6801@ifclear GENERIC
6802@lowersections
6803@end ifclear
6804@end ifset
6805
78058a5e
SL
6806@ifset NIOSII
6807@ifclear GENERIC
6808@raisesections
6809@end ifclear
6810
6811@node Nios II
6812@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6813@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6814@kindex --relax on Nios II
6815
6816Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6817transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6818which may result in @command{ld} giving
6819@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6820The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6821trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6822outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6823trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6824be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6825larger than 256MB.
6826
6827The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6828is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6829@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6830locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6831source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6832register as a temporary.
6833
6834Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6835relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6836option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6837
6838@ifclear GENERIC
6839@lowersections
6840@end ifclear
6841@end ifset
6842
2a60a7a8
AM
6843@ifset POWERPC
6844@ifclear GENERIC
6845@raisesections
6846@end ifclear
6847
6848@node PowerPC ELF32
6849@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6850@cindex PowerPC long branches
6851@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6852Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6853displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6854@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6855@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6856the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6857section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6858section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6859@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6860both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6861considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6862
6863@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6864@table @option
6865@cindex PowerPC PLT
6866@kindex --bss-plt
6867@item --bss-plt
6868Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6869generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6870the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6871writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6872@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6873PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6874compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6875BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6876
016687f8
AM
6877@kindex --secure-plt
6878@item --secure-plt
6879@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6880@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6881when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6882layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6883style BSS PLT.
6884
2a60a7a8
AM
6885@cindex PowerPC GOT
6886@kindex --sdata-got
6887@item --sdata-got
6888The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6889sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6890@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6891section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6892@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6893@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6894@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6895@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6896PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6897pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6898GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6899really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6900
6901@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6902@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6903@item --emit-stub-syms
6904This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6905symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6906
6907@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6908@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6909@item --no-tls-optimize
6910PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6911sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6912disable the optimization.
6913@end table
6914
6915@ifclear GENERIC
6916@lowersections
6917@end ifclear
6918@end ifset
6919
6920@ifset POWERPC64
6921@ifclear GENERIC
6922@raisesections
6923@end ifclear
6924
6925@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6926@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6927
6928@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6929@table @option
6930@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6931@kindex --stub-group-size
6932@item --stub-group-size
6933Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6934by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6935@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6936sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6937a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6938the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6939conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6940prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6941A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6942branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6943@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6944@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6945detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6946positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6947
6948Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6949single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6950create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6951large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6952
6953@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6954@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6955@item --emit-stub-syms
6956This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6957symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6958
6959@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6960@kindex --dotsyms
6961@kindex --no-dotsyms
6962@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6963These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6964in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6965function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6966code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6967properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6968to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6969@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6970dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6971feature.
6972
6973@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6974@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6975@item --no-tls-optimize
6976PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6977sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6978disable the optimization.
6979
6980@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6981@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6982@item --no-opd-optimize
6983PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6984corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6985the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6986Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6987
6988@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6989@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6990@item --non-overlapping-opd
6991Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6992@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6993the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6994entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6995
6996@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6997@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6998@item --no-toc-optimize
6999PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7000entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7001reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7002marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7003marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7004relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7005unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7006reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7007discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7008reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7009code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7010optimization.
7011
7012@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7013@kindex --no-multi-toc
7014@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7015If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7016@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7017where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7018entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7019total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7020grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7021TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7022calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7023help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
702464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7025Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7026
7027@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7028@kindex --no-toc-sort
7029@item --no-toc-sort
7030By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7031happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7032placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7033with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7034referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7035@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7036results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7037off this feature.
7038
7039@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7040@kindex --plt-align
7041@kindex --no-plt-align
7042@item --plt-align
7043@itemx --no-plt-align
7044Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7045aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7046boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7047are packed tightly.
7048
7049@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7050@kindex --plt-static-chain
7051@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7052@item --plt-static-chain
7053@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7054Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7055chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7056chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7057
7058@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7059@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7060@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7061@item --plt-thread-safe
7062@itemx --no-thread-safe
7063With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7064lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7065another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7066order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7067memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7068barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7069looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7070seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7071default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7072@end table
7073
7074@ifclear GENERIC
7075@lowersections
7076@end ifclear
7077@end ifset
7078
49fa1e15
AM
7079@ifset SPU
7080@ifclear GENERIC
7081@raisesections
7082@end ifclear
7083
7084@node SPU ELF
7085@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7086
7087@cindex SPU ELF options
7088@table @option
7089
7090@cindex SPU plugins
7091@kindex --plugin
7092@item --plugin
7093This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7094
7095@cindex SPU overlays
7096@kindex --no-overlays
7097@item --no-overlays
7098Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7099regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7100@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7101turns off all this special overlay handling.
7102
7103@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7104@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7105@item --emit-stub-syms
7106This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7107symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7108
7109@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7110@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7111@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7112This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7113function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7114on calls to non-overlay regions.
7115
7116@cindex SPU local store size
7117@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7118@item --local-store=lo:hi
7119@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7120the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7121range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7122
c0065db7 7123@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7124@kindex --stack-analysis
7125@item --stack-analysis
7126SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7127unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7128under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7129@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7130@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7131determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7132for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7133for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7134for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7135find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7136and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7137under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7138dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7139is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7140and calls will be given.
7141
c0065db7 7142@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7143@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7144@item --emit-stack-syms
7145This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7146in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7147These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7148functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7149functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7150such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7151The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7152@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7153@end table
7154
7155@ifclear GENERIC
7156@lowersections
7157@end ifclear
7158@end ifset
7159
36f63dca
NC
7160@ifset TICOFF
7161@ifclear GENERIC
7162@raisesections
7163@end ifclear
7164
7165@node TI COFF
7166@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7167@cindex TI COFF versions
7168@kindex --format=@var{version}
7169The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7170TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7171also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7172format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7173header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7174
7175@ifclear GENERIC
7176@lowersections
7177@end ifclear
7178@end ifset
7179
2ca22b03
NC
7180@ifset WIN32
7181@ifclear GENERIC
7182@raisesections
7183@end ifclear
7184
7185@node WIN32
7186@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7187
c0065db7 7188This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7189See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7190command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7191
7192@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7193@cindex import libraries
7194@item import libraries
69da35b5 7195The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7196libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7197regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7198archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7199support for creating such libraries provided with the
7200@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7201
c0065db7
RM
7202@item exporting DLL symbols
7203@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7204The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7205
7206@table @emph
7207@item using auto-export functionality
7208@cindex using auto-export functionality
7209By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7210which is controlled by the following command line options:
7211
0a5d968e
NC
7212@itemize
7213@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7214@item --exclude-symbols
7215@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7216@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7217@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7218@end itemize
7219
09e2aba4
DK
7220When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7221(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7222symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7223often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7224private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7225options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7226exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7227final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7228
7229If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7230command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7231if either of the following are true:
7232
7233@itemize
7234@item A DEF file is used.
7235@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7236@end itemize
dc8465bf 7237
c0065db7
RM
7238@item using a DEF file
7239@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7240Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7241an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7242exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7243name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7244command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7245
7246@example
7247gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7248@end example
7249
0a5d968e
NC
7250Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7251@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7252
dc8465bf
NC
7253Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7254
7255@example
4b5bd4e7 7256LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7257
7258EXPORTS
7259foo
7260bar
7261_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7262another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7263var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7264doo = foo == foo2
7265eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7266@end example
dc8465bf 7267
7fcab871 7268This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7269symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7270alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7271by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7272@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7273@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7274export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7275in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7276symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7277
6b31ad16
DS
7278The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7279name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7280the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7281
b45619c0
NC
7282When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7283library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7284@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7285executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7286
7287With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7288specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7289non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7290
7291If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7292or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7293filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7294
4b5bd4e7
DS
7295The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7296
7297@example
7298EXPORTS
7299 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7300 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7301 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7302@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7303
7304Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7305@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7306@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7307@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7308Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7309@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7310string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7311
7312The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7313
7314@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7315will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7316by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7317linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7318library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7319
7320@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7321The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7322the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7323@code{*_imp__foo}).
7324
7325@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7326well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7327read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7328variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7329the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7330extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7331application will behave unexpectedly.
7332
7333@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7334it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7335symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7336API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7337the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7338
4b5bd4e7
DS
7339See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7340other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7341
7342@cindex creating a DEF file
7343While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7344with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7345
7346@item Using decorations
7347@cindex Using decorations
7348Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7349itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7350declared as:
7351
7352@example
7353__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7354__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7355@end example
7356
7357All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7358any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7359this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7360the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7361
7362Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7363decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7364instead:
7365
7366@example
7367__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7368__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7369@end example
7370
c0065db7
RM
7371This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7372when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7373variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7374code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7375of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7376omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7377@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7378information.
c0065db7 7379@end table
dc8465bf 7380
2ca22b03
NC
7381@cindex automatic data imports
7382@item automatic data imports
7383The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7384by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7385compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7386issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7387code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7388c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7389initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7390decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7391platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7392command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7393The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7394suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7395trigger the feature's use.
7396
c0065db7 7397auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7398additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7399
c0065db7 7400"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7401documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7402
c0065db7
RM
7403The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7404occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7405One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7406below.
7407
7408@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7409For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7410object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7411offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7412field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7413in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7414without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7415The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7416references.
7417
c0065db7
RM
7418The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7419be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7420themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7421runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7422compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7423support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7424run without error on an older system.
7425
c0065db7
RM
7426@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7427enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7428
7429@cindex direct linking to a dll
7430@item direct linking to a dll
7431The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7432including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7433libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7434traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7435libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7436function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7437though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7438storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7439tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7440large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7441
c0065db7 7442Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7443@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7444of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7445perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7446select the dll instead of an import library.
7447
2ca22b03 7448
69da35b5
NC
7449For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7450to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7451
7452@example
45e948fe
NC
7453libxxx.dll.a
7454xxx.dll.a
7455libxxx.a
7456xxx.lib
69da35b5 7457cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7458libxxx.dll
7459xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7460@end example
7461
69da35b5
NC
7462before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7463
c0065db7
RM
7464(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7465where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7466@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7467file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7468@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7469
c0065db7
RM
7470Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7471@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7472was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7473various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7474could coexist on the same machine.
7475
2ca22b03
NC
7476The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7477applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7478libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7479
7480@example
7481bin/
7482 cygxxx.dll
7483lib/
7484 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7485 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7486@end example
7487
c0065db7
RM
7488Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7489done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7490
74911. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7492@example
7493gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7494@end example
2ca22b03 7495
69da35b5
NC
7496However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7497(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7498@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7499not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7500
2ca22b03
NC
75012. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7502directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7503should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7504making the app/dll.
7505
7506@example
7507ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7508@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7509
7510Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7511
7512@example
7513gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7514@end example
69da35b5
NC
7515
7516This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7517perfectly legal
7518
7519@example
7520bin/
7521 cygxxx-5.dll
7522lib/
c0065db7 7523 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7524@end example
7525
dc8465bf 7526Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7527even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7528@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7529
7530Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7531wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7532
75331. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7534work with auto-imported data.
7535
dc8465bf
NC
75362. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7537import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7538symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7539for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7540possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7541
45e948fe
NC
75423. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7543critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7544in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7545stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7546
69da35b5 7547So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7548true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7549a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7550binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7551massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7552requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7553will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7554
c0065db7 7555@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7556@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7557@item adding additional names
7558Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7559A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7560exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7561when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7562import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7563
c0065db7 7564@example
dc8465bf
NC
7565LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7566
7567EXPORTS
c0065db7 7568foo
dc8465bf 7569_foo = foo
c0065db7 7570@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7571
7572The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7573
7574Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7575source code using the "weak" attribute:
7576
c0065db7
RM
7577@example
7578void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7579void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7580@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7581
7582See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7583symbols.
7584
7585@item renaming symbols
7586Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7587kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7588@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7589DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7590created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7591
c0065db7 7592@example
dc8465bf
NC
7593LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7594
7595EXPORTS
7596_foo = foo
c0065db7 7597@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7598
7599The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7600@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7601@end table
dc8465bf 7602
0a5d968e 7603Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7604unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7605If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7606@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7607that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7608@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7609renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7610to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7611the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7612In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7613which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7614
7615@cindex weak externals
7616@item weak externals
7617The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7618weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7619defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7620are three variants of weak externals:
7621@itemize
7622@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7623called lazy externals.
7624@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7625This form is not presently implemented.
7626@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7627implemented.
7628@end itemize
7629As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7630are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7631uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7632
7633@cindex aligned common symbols
7634@item aligned common symbols
7635As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7636desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7637the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7638carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7639by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7640tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7641but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7642warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7643
2ca22b03
NC
7644@end table
7645
7646@ifclear GENERIC
7647@lowersections
7648@end ifclear
7649@end ifset
7650
e0001a05
NC
7651@ifset XTENSA
7652@ifclear GENERIC
7653@raisesections
7654@end ifclear
7655
7656@node Xtensa
7657@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7658
7659@cindex Xtensa processors
7660The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7661@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7662specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7663keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7664example, with the command:
7665
7666@smallexample
7667SECTIONS
7668@{
7669 .text : @{
7670 *(.literal .text)
7671 @}
7672@}
7673@end smallexample
7674
7675@noindent
7676@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7677and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7678literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7679interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7680group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7681files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7682and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7683
43cd72b9 7684@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7685@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7686Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7687provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7688is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7689literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7690will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7691location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7692the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7693unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7694@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7695range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7696
7697For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7698to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7699instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7700instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7701instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7702@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7703hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7704By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7705switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7706density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7707instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7708performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7709linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7710a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7711
7712The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7713control the linker:
7714
7715@cindex Xtensa options
7716@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7717@item --size-opt
7718When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7719more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7720no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7721alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7722preserve the correctness of the code.
7723@end table
e0001a05
NC
7724
7725@ifclear GENERIC
7726@lowersections
7727@end ifclear
7728@end ifset
7729
252b5132
RH
7730@ifclear SingleFormat
7731@node BFD
7732@chapter BFD
7733
7734@cindex back end
7735@cindex object file management
7736@cindex object formats available
7737@kindex objdump -i
7738The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7739These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7740object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7741format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7742it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7743associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7744object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7745(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7746list all the formats available for your configuration.
7747
7748@cindex BFD requirements
7749@cindex requirements for BFD
7750As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7751several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7752BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7753formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7754been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7755BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7756may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7757
7758One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7759mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7760useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7761conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7762
7763@menu
7764* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7765@end menu
7766
7767@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7768@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7769@cindex opening object files
7770@include bfdsumm.texi
7771@end ifclear
7772
7773@node Reporting Bugs
7774@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7775@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7776@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7777
ff5dcc92 7778Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7779
7780Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7781it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7782to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7783work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7784@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7785
7786In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7787information that enables us to fix the bug.
7788
7789@menu
7790* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7791* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7792@end menu
7793
7794@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7795@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7796@cindex bug criteria
7797
7798If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7799
7800@itemize @bullet
7801@cindex fatal signal
7802@cindex linker crash
7803@cindex crash of linker
7804@item
7805If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7806@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7807
7808@cindex error on valid input
7809@item
ff5dcc92 7810If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7811
7812@cindex invalid input
7813@item
ff5dcc92 7814If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7815may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7816object files are correct.
7817
7818@item
7819If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7820improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7821@end itemize
7822
7823@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7824@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7825@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7826@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7827
7828A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7829products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7830recommend you contact that organization first.
7831
7832You can find contact information for many support companies and
7833individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7834distribution.
7835
ad22bfe8 7836@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7837Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7838@value{BUGURL}.
7839@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7840
7841The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7842@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7843fact or leave it out, state it!
7844
7845Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7846problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7847assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7848matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7849the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7850location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7851were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7852into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7853specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7854and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7855
7856Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7857the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7858on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7859
7860Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7861bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7862respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7863You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7864
7865To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7866
7867@itemize @bullet
7868@item
ff5dcc92 7869The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7870the @samp{--version} argument.
7871
7872Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7873the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7874
7875@item
ff5dcc92 7876Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7877patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7878
7879@item
7880The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7881version number.
7882
7883@item
ff5dcc92 7884What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7885``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7886
7887@item
7888The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7889observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7890list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7891sufficient.
7892
7893If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7894and then we might not encounter the bug.
7895
7896@item
7897A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7898bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7899provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7900bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7901state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7902requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7903we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7904attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7905
7906If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7907@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7908object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7909@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7910how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7911
7912@item
7913A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7914incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7915
ff5dcc92 7916Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7917will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7918not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7919a chance to make a mistake.
7920
7921Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7922say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7923copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7924C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7925and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7926fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7927you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7928any conclusion from our observations.
7929
7930@item
ff5dcc92 7931If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7932diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7933@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7934If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7935context, not by line number.
7936
7937The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7938sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7939@end itemize
7940
7941Here are some things that are not necessary:
7942
7943@itemize @bullet
7944@item
7945A description of the envelope of the bug.
7946
7947Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7948which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7949changes will not affect it.
7950
7951This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7952will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7953with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7954We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7955
7956Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7957of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7958output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7959less time, and so on.
7960
7961However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7962report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7963
7964@item
7965A patch for the bug.
7966
7967A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7968the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7969a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7970to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7971
ff5dcc92 7972Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7973construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7974through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7975able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7976fixed.
7977
7978And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7979patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7980help us to understand.
7981
7982@item
7983A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7984
7985Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7986things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7987@end itemize
7988
7989@node MRI
7990@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7991@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7992To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7993linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7994alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7995described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7996simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7997@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7998linker commands; these commands are described here.
7999
8000In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8001file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8002features to make use of them.
8003
8004You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8005@samp{-c} command-line option.
8006
8007Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8008command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8009blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8010MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8011issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8012
8013Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8014
8015You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8016lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8017The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8018
8019@table @code
8020@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8021@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8022@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8023Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8024the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8025@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8026your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8027script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8028commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8029input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8030@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8031
8032@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8033@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8034Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8035in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8036
8037@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8038
8039@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8040@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8041Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8042@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8043
8044@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8045@item BASE @var{expression}
8046Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8047absolute addresses) in the output file.
8048
8049@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8050@item CHIP @var{expression}
8051@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8052This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8053
8054@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8055@item END
8056This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8057
8058@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8059@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8060Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8061language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8062
8063@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8064@item
252b5132
RH
8065S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8066
8067@item
8068IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8069
8070@item
8071COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8072@samp{COFF}
8073@end enumerate
8074
8075@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8076@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8077Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8078@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8079
8080The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8081same line, with no change in its effect.
8082
8083@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8084@item LOAD @var{filename}
8085@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8086Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8087same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8088command line.
8089
8090@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8091@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8092@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8093MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8094option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8095
8096@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8097@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8098@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8099Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8100order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8101script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8102sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8103file, in the order specified.
8104
8105@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8106@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8107@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8108@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8109Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8110@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8111
8112@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8113@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8114@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8115@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8116You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8117specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8118If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8119@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8120@end table
8121
793c5807
NC
8122@node GNU Free Documentation License
8123@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8124@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8125
370b66a1
CD
8126@node LD Index
8127@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8128
8129@printindex cp
8130
8131@tex
7ca01ed9 8132% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8133% meantime:
8134\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8135\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8136\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8137\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8138\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8139\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8140\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8141\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8142\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8143% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8144@end tex
8145
252b5132 8146@bye
This page took 1.595412 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.